#
1.92 |
|
22-Apr-2024 |
nia |
Move MIPS N64 compat out of {base,debug}32 into {base,debug}64
martin requested separation by ABI and it doesn't make much sense to have 64-bit binaries in a set called 32.
|
#
1.91 |
|
09-Apr-2024 |
nia |
Add new sets: base32, debug32, manhtml
- base32 contains (when MKCOMPAT=yes) shared libraries for 32-bit compatibility, previously included in base
- debug32 contains (when MKCOMPAT=yes) debug symbols and static libraries containing debug symbols for 32-bit compatiblity, previously included in debug
- manhtml contains (when MKHTML=yes) the HTML files previously included in 'man', which are of limited utility without third-party software.
The motivation for this change is to be able to easily exclude sets from CD-ROM images that go over the size limit without xz compression (which many NetBSD platforms struggle to extract at acceptable speeds).
|
#
1.90 |
|
17-Dec-2023 |
martin |
Add a https transfer method (sharing all host details with the http transfer). Make this method the default for all downloads.
Try to make sure the binary pkg installation (which runs in a chroot in the already installed system) can make use of SSL verification.
This does NOT fix the missing SSL verification in most install media even if using https (due to not fully populated /etc/openssl/certs).
|
#
1.89 |
|
14-Mar-2023 |
kre |
Correct a minor word usage error in a comment. NFC.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-10-0-RC1 netbsd-10-base
|
#
1.88 |
|
15-Dec-2022 |
martin |
branches: 1.88.2; Add an (expert) option to manually edit partitions, inspired by PR 57100.
|
#
1.87 |
|
11-Jul-2022 |
martin |
Avoid C++-isms (stupid muscle memory) to fix the build.
|
#
1.86 |
|
10-Jul-2022 |
martin |
Preparations to make the extended partitioning during normal installation more usefull - pass an optional install_description to partman().
|
#
1.85 |
|
24-Jun-2022 |
tsutsui |
Check on-disk disklabel properly even on ports without raw BSD disklabel.
Fixes PR install/56890.
|
#
1.84 |
|
19-Jun-2022 |
martin |
Centralize the "we can newfs this type of filesystem" predicate and fix the list.
|
#
1.83 |
|
22-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various small typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.82 |
|
18-May-2022 |
martin |
When not invoked via some explicit "configure network" menu item, auto-detect an already working network setup and offer to "just use" it whenver we need connectivity.
|
#
1.81 |
|
21-Apr-2022 |
martin |
Make default installations a bit more secure: - push a bit harder for setup of a root password - simplify/clarify manual entropy setup - visit the entropy setup (on machines where it is needed) on the default path through sysinst
|
#
1.80 |
|
10-Feb-2022 |
martin |
x86: fix previous: in the UEFI case copy the bootloaders from install media during initial installation, but use the (by then: updated) files from the target disk for system upgrades.
|
#
1.79 |
|
30-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Do not defer wedge deletions when we have nothing mounted. Define and use a constant for maximum disk name length.
|
#
1.78 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
When upgrading, update the boot code post extraction from the updated target file system.
|
#
1.77 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Try to get rid of all wedges we created (after unmounting).
|
#
1.76 |
|
05-Dec-2021 |
msaitoh |
s/exisit/exist/ in comment.
|
#
1.75 |
|
08-Oct-2021 |
martin |
Re-enable the entropy handling code in sysinst (only visible on machines that do not have full entropy), but move it to the config menu instead of enforcing it as mandatory step.
This menu is shown at the end of the setup, or if explicitly invoked from the main menu.
Some of the input options are complex but useful in some situations and code to support them is tiny. Most users will use the manual input (first + default option) but some might prefer to connect a USB TRNG or have easy setups to transfer entropy from another machine (while copy & paste on a serial console sometimes is tricky).
|
#
1.74 |
|
26-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Restore MKNOUVEAUFIRMWARE and MKRADEONFIRMWARE and make gpufw set unconditional
Simplifies logic. (Second commit - first one was partial)
Restoring MK* requested by mrg on tech-kern discussion https://mail-index.netbsd.org/tech-kern/2021/09/25/msg027695.html
|
#
1.73 |
|
25-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Move DRM-driver firmware from base to its own set, gpufw
This set is only installed on amd64,i386,evbarm. This set is installed on minimal installs and on install media, in case someone needs it for basic driver functionality.
Comments: Switched to a single MK tunable for it - that is probably unneeded.
An upcoming DRM update will include even fatter firmware, and we'd like to minimize the impact of it.
|
#
1.72 |
|
12-Aug-2021 |
martin |
PR 56354: all actions to set up swap space are not guaranteed to gain us enough virtual memory anyway, so drop return codes from set_swap*. The state for cleanup (which swap dev to unuse) has been made global some time ago anyway.
Previously use of the return values was inconsistent. Error reporting will only confuse users and sometimes the situation is hard to fix or even impossible (like in miniroots copide to swap space for booting).
|
#
1.71 |
|
13-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR install/56303: when using xz files enable swap during set extraction if the machine does not have more than 256MB of RAM.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.70 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.69 |
|
04-Nov-2020 |
martin |
Add (experimental) entropy input support: Early during new installs or after upgrades we check if entropy is available. If not (no hardware random number generator available) we inform the user and ask them to fix it.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.91 |
|
09-Apr-2024 |
nia |
Add new sets: base32, debug32, manhtml
- base32 contains (when MKCOMPAT=yes) shared libraries for 32-bit compatibility, previously included in base
- debug32 contains (when MKCOMPAT=yes) debug symbols and static libraries containing debug symbols for 32-bit compatiblity, previously included in debug
- manhtml contains (when MKHTML=yes) the HTML files previously included in 'man', which are of limited utility without third-party software.
The motivation for this change is to be able to easily exclude sets from CD-ROM images that go over the size limit without xz compression (which many NetBSD platforms struggle to extract at acceptable speeds).
|
#
1.90 |
|
17-Dec-2023 |
martin |
Add a https transfer method (sharing all host details with the http transfer). Make this method the default for all downloads.
Try to make sure the binary pkg installation (which runs in a chroot in the already installed system) can make use of SSL verification.
This does NOT fix the missing SSL verification in most install media even if using https (due to not fully populated /etc/openssl/certs).
|
#
1.89 |
|
14-Mar-2023 |
kre |
Correct a minor word usage error in a comment. NFC.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-10-0-RC1 netbsd-10-base
|
#
1.88 |
|
15-Dec-2022 |
martin |
branches: 1.88.2; Add an (expert) option to manually edit partitions, inspired by PR 57100.
|
#
1.87 |
|
11-Jul-2022 |
martin |
Avoid C++-isms (stupid muscle memory) to fix the build.
|
#
1.86 |
|
10-Jul-2022 |
martin |
Preparations to make the extended partitioning during normal installation more usefull - pass an optional install_description to partman().
|
#
1.85 |
|
24-Jun-2022 |
tsutsui |
Check on-disk disklabel properly even on ports without raw BSD disklabel.
Fixes PR install/56890.
|
#
1.84 |
|
19-Jun-2022 |
martin |
Centralize the "we can newfs this type of filesystem" predicate and fix the list.
|
#
1.83 |
|
22-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various small typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.82 |
|
18-May-2022 |
martin |
When not invoked via some explicit "configure network" menu item, auto-detect an already working network setup and offer to "just use" it whenver we need connectivity.
|
#
1.81 |
|
21-Apr-2022 |
martin |
Make default installations a bit more secure: - push a bit harder for setup of a root password - simplify/clarify manual entropy setup - visit the entropy setup (on machines where it is needed) on the default path through sysinst
|
#
1.80 |
|
10-Feb-2022 |
martin |
x86: fix previous: in the UEFI case copy the bootloaders from install media during initial installation, but use the (by then: updated) files from the target disk for system upgrades.
|
#
1.79 |
|
30-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Do not defer wedge deletions when we have nothing mounted. Define and use a constant for maximum disk name length.
|
#
1.78 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
When upgrading, update the boot code post extraction from the updated target file system.
|
#
1.77 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Try to get rid of all wedges we created (after unmounting).
|
#
1.76 |
|
05-Dec-2021 |
msaitoh |
s/exisit/exist/ in comment.
|
#
1.75 |
|
08-Oct-2021 |
martin |
Re-enable the entropy handling code in sysinst (only visible on machines that do not have full entropy), but move it to the config menu instead of enforcing it as mandatory step.
This menu is shown at the end of the setup, or if explicitly invoked from the main menu.
Some of the input options are complex but useful in some situations and code to support them is tiny. Most users will use the manual input (first + default option) but some might prefer to connect a USB TRNG or have easy setups to transfer entropy from another machine (while copy & paste on a serial console sometimes is tricky).
|
#
1.74 |
|
26-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Restore MKNOUVEAUFIRMWARE and MKRADEONFIRMWARE and make gpufw set unconditional
Simplifies logic. (Second commit - first one was partial)
Restoring MK* requested by mrg on tech-kern discussion https://mail-index.netbsd.org/tech-kern/2021/09/25/msg027695.html
|
#
1.73 |
|
25-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Move DRM-driver firmware from base to its own set, gpufw
This set is only installed on amd64,i386,evbarm. This set is installed on minimal installs and on install media, in case someone needs it for basic driver functionality.
Comments: Switched to a single MK tunable for it - that is probably unneeded.
An upcoming DRM update will include even fatter firmware, and we'd like to minimize the impact of it.
|
#
1.72 |
|
12-Aug-2021 |
martin |
PR 56354: all actions to set up swap space are not guaranteed to gain us enough virtual memory anyway, so drop return codes from set_swap*. The state for cleanup (which swap dev to unuse) has been made global some time ago anyway.
Previously use of the return values was inconsistent. Error reporting will only confuse users and sometimes the situation is hard to fix or even impossible (like in miniroots copide to swap space for booting).
|
#
1.71 |
|
13-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR install/56303: when using xz files enable swap during set extraction if the machine does not have more than 256MB of RAM.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.70 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.69 |
|
04-Nov-2020 |
martin |
Add (experimental) entropy input support: Early during new installs or after upgrades we check if entropy is available. If not (no hardware random number generator available) we inform the user and ask them to fix it.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.90 |
|
17-Dec-2023 |
martin |
Add a https transfer method (sharing all host details with the http transfer). Make this method the default for all downloads.
Try to make sure the binary pkg installation (which runs in a chroot in the already installed system) can make use of SSL verification.
This does NOT fix the missing SSL verification in most install media even if using https (due to not fully populated /etc/openssl/certs).
|
#
1.89 |
|
14-Mar-2023 |
kre |
Correct a minor word usage error in a comment. NFC.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-10-0-RC1 netbsd-10-base
|
#
1.88 |
|
15-Dec-2022 |
martin |
Add an (expert) option to manually edit partitions, inspired by PR 57100.
|
#
1.87 |
|
11-Jul-2022 |
martin |
Avoid C++-isms (stupid muscle memory) to fix the build.
|
#
1.86 |
|
10-Jul-2022 |
martin |
Preparations to make the extended partitioning during normal installation more usefull - pass an optional install_description to partman().
|
#
1.85 |
|
24-Jun-2022 |
tsutsui |
Check on-disk disklabel properly even on ports without raw BSD disklabel.
Fixes PR install/56890.
|
#
1.84 |
|
19-Jun-2022 |
martin |
Centralize the "we can newfs this type of filesystem" predicate and fix the list.
|
#
1.83 |
|
22-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various small typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.82 |
|
18-May-2022 |
martin |
When not invoked via some explicit "configure network" menu item, auto-detect an already working network setup and offer to "just use" it whenver we need connectivity.
|
#
1.81 |
|
21-Apr-2022 |
martin |
Make default installations a bit more secure: - push a bit harder for setup of a root password - simplify/clarify manual entropy setup - visit the entropy setup (on machines where it is needed) on the default path through sysinst
|
#
1.80 |
|
10-Feb-2022 |
martin |
x86: fix previous: in the UEFI case copy the bootloaders from install media during initial installation, but use the (by then: updated) files from the target disk for system upgrades.
|
#
1.79 |
|
30-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Do not defer wedge deletions when we have nothing mounted. Define and use a constant for maximum disk name length.
|
#
1.78 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
When upgrading, update the boot code post extraction from the updated target file system.
|
#
1.77 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Try to get rid of all wedges we created (after unmounting).
|
#
1.76 |
|
05-Dec-2021 |
msaitoh |
s/exisit/exist/ in comment.
|
#
1.75 |
|
08-Oct-2021 |
martin |
Re-enable the entropy handling code in sysinst (only visible on machines that do not have full entropy), but move it to the config menu instead of enforcing it as mandatory step.
This menu is shown at the end of the setup, or if explicitly invoked from the main menu.
Some of the input options are complex but useful in some situations and code to support them is tiny. Most users will use the manual input (first + default option) but some might prefer to connect a USB TRNG or have easy setups to transfer entropy from another machine (while copy & paste on a serial console sometimes is tricky).
|
#
1.74 |
|
26-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Restore MKNOUVEAUFIRMWARE and MKRADEONFIRMWARE and make gpufw set unconditional
Simplifies logic. (Second commit - first one was partial)
Restoring MK* requested by mrg on tech-kern discussion https://mail-index.netbsd.org/tech-kern/2021/09/25/msg027695.html
|
#
1.73 |
|
25-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Move DRM-driver firmware from base to its own set, gpufw
This set is only installed on amd64,i386,evbarm. This set is installed on minimal installs and on install media, in case someone needs it for basic driver functionality.
Comments: Switched to a single MK tunable for it - that is probably unneeded.
An upcoming DRM update will include even fatter firmware, and we'd like to minimize the impact of it.
|
#
1.72 |
|
12-Aug-2021 |
martin |
PR 56354: all actions to set up swap space are not guaranteed to gain us enough virtual memory anyway, so drop return codes from set_swap*. The state for cleanup (which swap dev to unuse) has been made global some time ago anyway.
Previously use of the return values was inconsistent. Error reporting will only confuse users and sometimes the situation is hard to fix or even impossible (like in miniroots copide to swap space for booting).
|
#
1.71 |
|
13-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR install/56303: when using xz files enable swap during set extraction if the machine does not have more than 256MB of RAM.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.70 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.69 |
|
04-Nov-2020 |
martin |
Add (experimental) entropy input support: Early during new installs or after upgrades we check if entropy is available. If not (no hardware random number generator available) we inform the user and ask them to fix it.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.89 |
|
14-Mar-2023 |
kre |
Correct a minor word usage error in a comment. NFC.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-10-base
|
#
1.88 |
|
15-Dec-2022 |
martin |
Add an (expert) option to manually edit partitions, inspired by PR 57100.
|
#
1.87 |
|
11-Jul-2022 |
martin |
Avoid C++-isms (stupid muscle memory) to fix the build.
|
#
1.86 |
|
10-Jul-2022 |
martin |
Preparations to make the extended partitioning during normal installation more usefull - pass an optional install_description to partman().
|
#
1.85 |
|
24-Jun-2022 |
tsutsui |
Check on-disk disklabel properly even on ports without raw BSD disklabel.
Fixes PR install/56890.
|
#
1.84 |
|
19-Jun-2022 |
martin |
Centralize the "we can newfs this type of filesystem" predicate and fix the list.
|
#
1.83 |
|
22-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various small typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.82 |
|
18-May-2022 |
martin |
When not invoked via some explicit "configure network" menu item, auto-detect an already working network setup and offer to "just use" it whenver we need connectivity.
|
#
1.81 |
|
21-Apr-2022 |
martin |
Make default installations a bit more secure: - push a bit harder for setup of a root password - simplify/clarify manual entropy setup - visit the entropy setup (on machines where it is needed) on the default path through sysinst
|
#
1.80 |
|
10-Feb-2022 |
martin |
x86: fix previous: in the UEFI case copy the bootloaders from install media during initial installation, but use the (by then: updated) files from the target disk for system upgrades.
|
#
1.79 |
|
30-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Do not defer wedge deletions when we have nothing mounted. Define and use a constant for maximum disk name length.
|
#
1.78 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
When upgrading, update the boot code post extraction from the updated target file system.
|
#
1.77 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Try to get rid of all wedges we created (after unmounting).
|
#
1.76 |
|
05-Dec-2021 |
msaitoh |
s/exisit/exist/ in comment.
|
#
1.75 |
|
08-Oct-2021 |
martin |
Re-enable the entropy handling code in sysinst (only visible on machines that do not have full entropy), but move it to the config menu instead of enforcing it as mandatory step.
This menu is shown at the end of the setup, or if explicitly invoked from the main menu.
Some of the input options are complex but useful in some situations and code to support them is tiny. Most users will use the manual input (first + default option) but some might prefer to connect a USB TRNG or have easy setups to transfer entropy from another machine (while copy & paste on a serial console sometimes is tricky).
|
#
1.74 |
|
26-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Restore MKNOUVEAUFIRMWARE and MKRADEONFIRMWARE and make gpufw set unconditional
Simplifies logic. (Second commit - first one was partial)
Restoring MK* requested by mrg on tech-kern discussion https://mail-index.netbsd.org/tech-kern/2021/09/25/msg027695.html
|
#
1.73 |
|
25-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Move DRM-driver firmware from base to its own set, gpufw
This set is only installed on amd64,i386,evbarm. This set is installed on minimal installs and on install media, in case someone needs it for basic driver functionality.
Comments: Switched to a single MK tunable for it - that is probably unneeded.
An upcoming DRM update will include even fatter firmware, and we'd like to minimize the impact of it.
|
#
1.72 |
|
12-Aug-2021 |
martin |
PR 56354: all actions to set up swap space are not guaranteed to gain us enough virtual memory anyway, so drop return codes from set_swap*. The state for cleanup (which swap dev to unuse) has been made global some time ago anyway.
Previously use of the return values was inconsistent. Error reporting will only confuse users and sometimes the situation is hard to fix or even impossible (like in miniroots copide to swap space for booting).
|
#
1.71 |
|
13-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR install/56303: when using xz files enable swap during set extraction if the machine does not have more than 256MB of RAM.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.70 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.69 |
|
04-Nov-2020 |
martin |
Add (experimental) entropy input support: Early during new installs or after upgrades we check if entropy is available. If not (no hardware random number generator available) we inform the user and ask them to fix it.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-10-base
|
#
1.88 |
|
15-Dec-2022 |
martin |
Add an (expert) option to manually edit partitions, inspired by PR 57100.
|
#
1.87 |
|
11-Jul-2022 |
martin |
Avoid C++-isms (stupid muscle memory) to fix the build.
|
#
1.86 |
|
10-Jul-2022 |
martin |
Preparations to make the extended partitioning during normal installation more usefull - pass an optional install_description to partman().
|
#
1.85 |
|
24-Jun-2022 |
tsutsui |
Check on-disk disklabel properly even on ports without raw BSD disklabel.
Fixes PR install/56890.
|
#
1.84 |
|
19-Jun-2022 |
martin |
Centralize the "we can newfs this type of filesystem" predicate and fix the list.
|
#
1.83 |
|
22-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various small typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.82 |
|
18-May-2022 |
martin |
When not invoked via some explicit "configure network" menu item, auto-detect an already working network setup and offer to "just use" it whenver we need connectivity.
|
#
1.81 |
|
21-Apr-2022 |
martin |
Make default installations a bit more secure: - push a bit harder for setup of a root password - simplify/clarify manual entropy setup - visit the entropy setup (on machines where it is needed) on the default path through sysinst
|
#
1.80 |
|
10-Feb-2022 |
martin |
x86: fix previous: in the UEFI case copy the bootloaders from install media during initial installation, but use the (by then: updated) files from the target disk for system upgrades.
|
#
1.79 |
|
30-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Do not defer wedge deletions when we have nothing mounted. Define and use a constant for maximum disk name length.
|
#
1.78 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
When upgrading, update the boot code post extraction from the updated target file system.
|
#
1.77 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Try to get rid of all wedges we created (after unmounting).
|
#
1.76 |
|
05-Dec-2021 |
msaitoh |
s/exisit/exist/ in comment.
|
#
1.75 |
|
08-Oct-2021 |
martin |
Re-enable the entropy handling code in sysinst (only visible on machines that do not have full entropy), but move it to the config menu instead of enforcing it as mandatory step.
This menu is shown at the end of the setup, or if explicitly invoked from the main menu.
Some of the input options are complex but useful in some situations and code to support them is tiny. Most users will use the manual input (first + default option) but some might prefer to connect a USB TRNG or have easy setups to transfer entropy from another machine (while copy & paste on a serial console sometimes is tricky).
|
#
1.74 |
|
26-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Restore MKNOUVEAUFIRMWARE and MKRADEONFIRMWARE and make gpufw set unconditional
Simplifies logic. (Second commit - first one was partial)
Restoring MK* requested by mrg on tech-kern discussion https://mail-index.netbsd.org/tech-kern/2021/09/25/msg027695.html
|
#
1.73 |
|
25-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Move DRM-driver firmware from base to its own set, gpufw
This set is only installed on amd64,i386,evbarm. This set is installed on minimal installs and on install media, in case someone needs it for basic driver functionality.
Comments: Switched to a single MK tunable for it - that is probably unneeded.
An upcoming DRM update will include even fatter firmware, and we'd like to minimize the impact of it.
|
#
1.72 |
|
12-Aug-2021 |
martin |
PR 56354: all actions to set up swap space are not guaranteed to gain us enough virtual memory anyway, so drop return codes from set_swap*. The state for cleanup (which swap dev to unuse) has been made global some time ago anyway.
Previously use of the return values was inconsistent. Error reporting will only confuse users and sometimes the situation is hard to fix or even impossible (like in miniroots copide to swap space for booting).
|
#
1.71 |
|
13-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR install/56303: when using xz files enable swap during set extraction if the machine does not have more than 256MB of RAM.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.70 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.69 |
|
04-Nov-2020 |
martin |
Add (experimental) entropy input support: Early during new installs or after upgrades we check if entropy is available. If not (no hardware random number generator available) we inform the user and ask them to fix it.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.87 |
|
11-Jul-2022 |
martin |
Avoid C++-isms (stupid muscle memory) to fix the build.
|
#
1.86 |
|
10-Jul-2022 |
martin |
Preparations to make the extended partitioning during normal installation more usefull - pass an optional install_description to partman().
|
#
1.85 |
|
24-Jun-2022 |
tsutsui |
Check on-disk disklabel properly even on ports without raw BSD disklabel.
Fixes PR install/56890.
|
#
1.84 |
|
19-Jun-2022 |
martin |
Centralize the "we can newfs this type of filesystem" predicate and fix the list.
|
#
1.83 |
|
22-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various small typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.82 |
|
18-May-2022 |
martin |
When not invoked via some explicit "configure network" menu item, auto-detect an already working network setup and offer to "just use" it whenver we need connectivity.
|
#
1.81 |
|
21-Apr-2022 |
martin |
Make default installations a bit more secure: - push a bit harder for setup of a root password - simplify/clarify manual entropy setup - visit the entropy setup (on machines where it is needed) on the default path through sysinst
|
#
1.80 |
|
10-Feb-2022 |
martin |
x86: fix previous: in the UEFI case copy the bootloaders from install media during initial installation, but use the (by then: updated) files from the target disk for system upgrades.
|
#
1.79 |
|
30-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Do not defer wedge deletions when we have nothing mounted. Define and use a constant for maximum disk name length.
|
#
1.78 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
When upgrading, update the boot code post extraction from the updated target file system.
|
#
1.77 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Try to get rid of all wedges we created (after unmounting).
|
#
1.76 |
|
05-Dec-2021 |
msaitoh |
s/exisit/exist/ in comment.
|
#
1.75 |
|
08-Oct-2021 |
martin |
Re-enable the entropy handling code in sysinst (only visible on machines that do not have full entropy), but move it to the config menu instead of enforcing it as mandatory step.
This menu is shown at the end of the setup, or if explicitly invoked from the main menu.
Some of the input options are complex but useful in some situations and code to support them is tiny. Most users will use the manual input (first + default option) but some might prefer to connect a USB TRNG or have easy setups to transfer entropy from another machine (while copy & paste on a serial console sometimes is tricky).
|
#
1.74 |
|
26-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Restore MKNOUVEAUFIRMWARE and MKRADEONFIRMWARE and make gpufw set unconditional
Simplifies logic. (Second commit - first one was partial)
Restoring MK* requested by mrg on tech-kern discussion https://mail-index.netbsd.org/tech-kern/2021/09/25/msg027695.html
|
#
1.73 |
|
25-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Move DRM-driver firmware from base to its own set, gpufw
This set is only installed on amd64,i386,evbarm. This set is installed on minimal installs and on install media, in case someone needs it for basic driver functionality.
Comments: Switched to a single MK tunable for it - that is probably unneeded.
An upcoming DRM update will include even fatter firmware, and we'd like to minimize the impact of it.
|
#
1.72 |
|
12-Aug-2021 |
martin |
PR 56354: all actions to set up swap space are not guaranteed to gain us enough virtual memory anyway, so drop return codes from set_swap*. The state for cleanup (which swap dev to unuse) has been made global some time ago anyway.
Previously use of the return values was inconsistent. Error reporting will only confuse users and sometimes the situation is hard to fix or even impossible (like in miniroots copide to swap space for booting).
|
#
1.71 |
|
13-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR install/56303: when using xz files enable swap during set extraction if the machine does not have more than 256MB of RAM.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.70 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.69 |
|
04-Nov-2020 |
martin |
Add (experimental) entropy input support: Early during new installs or after upgrades we check if entropy is available. If not (no hardware random number generator available) we inform the user and ask them to fix it.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.85 |
|
24-Jun-2022 |
tsutsui |
Check on-disk disklabel properly even on ports without raw BSD disklabel.
Fixes PR install/56890.
|
#
1.84 |
|
19-Jun-2022 |
martin |
Centralize the "we can newfs this type of filesystem" predicate and fix the list.
|
#
1.83 |
|
22-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various small typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.82 |
|
18-May-2022 |
martin |
When not invoked via some explicit "configure network" menu item, auto-detect an already working network setup and offer to "just use" it whenver we need connectivity.
|
#
1.81 |
|
21-Apr-2022 |
martin |
Make default installations a bit more secure: - push a bit harder for setup of a root password - simplify/clarify manual entropy setup - visit the entropy setup (on machines where it is needed) on the default path through sysinst
|
#
1.80 |
|
10-Feb-2022 |
martin |
x86: fix previous: in the UEFI case copy the bootloaders from install media during initial installation, but use the (by then: updated) files from the target disk for system upgrades.
|
#
1.79 |
|
30-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Do not defer wedge deletions when we have nothing mounted. Define and use a constant for maximum disk name length.
|
#
1.78 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
When upgrading, update the boot code post extraction from the updated target file system.
|
#
1.77 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Try to get rid of all wedges we created (after unmounting).
|
#
1.76 |
|
05-Dec-2021 |
msaitoh |
s/exisit/exist/ in comment.
|
#
1.75 |
|
08-Oct-2021 |
martin |
Re-enable the entropy handling code in sysinst (only visible on machines that do not have full entropy), but move it to the config menu instead of enforcing it as mandatory step.
This menu is shown at the end of the setup, or if explicitly invoked from the main menu.
Some of the input options are complex but useful in some situations and code to support them is tiny. Most users will use the manual input (first + default option) but some might prefer to connect a USB TRNG or have easy setups to transfer entropy from another machine (while copy & paste on a serial console sometimes is tricky).
|
#
1.74 |
|
26-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Restore MKNOUVEAUFIRMWARE and MKRADEONFIRMWARE and make gpufw set unconditional
Simplifies logic. (Second commit - first one was partial)
Restoring MK* requested by mrg on tech-kern discussion https://mail-index.netbsd.org/tech-kern/2021/09/25/msg027695.html
|
#
1.73 |
|
25-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Move DRM-driver firmware from base to its own set, gpufw
This set is only installed on amd64,i386,evbarm. This set is installed on minimal installs and on install media, in case someone needs it for basic driver functionality.
Comments: Switched to a single MK tunable for it - that is probably unneeded.
An upcoming DRM update will include even fatter firmware, and we'd like to minimize the impact of it.
|
#
1.72 |
|
12-Aug-2021 |
martin |
PR 56354: all actions to set up swap space are not guaranteed to gain us enough virtual memory anyway, so drop return codes from set_swap*. The state for cleanup (which swap dev to unuse) has been made global some time ago anyway.
Previously use of the return values was inconsistent. Error reporting will only confuse users and sometimes the situation is hard to fix or even impossible (like in miniroots copide to swap space for booting).
|
#
1.71 |
|
13-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR install/56303: when using xz files enable swap during set extraction if the machine does not have more than 256MB of RAM.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.70 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.69 |
|
04-Nov-2020 |
martin |
Add (experimental) entropy input support: Early during new installs or after upgrades we check if entropy is available. If not (no hardware random number generator available) we inform the user and ask them to fix it.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.84 |
|
19-Jun-2022 |
martin |
Centralize the "we can newfs this type of filesystem" predicate and fix the list.
|
#
1.83 |
|
22-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various small typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.82 |
|
18-May-2022 |
martin |
When not invoked via some explicit "configure network" menu item, auto-detect an already working network setup and offer to "just use" it whenver we need connectivity.
|
#
1.81 |
|
21-Apr-2022 |
martin |
Make default installations a bit more secure: - push a bit harder for setup of a root password - simplify/clarify manual entropy setup - visit the entropy setup (on machines where it is needed) on the default path through sysinst
|
#
1.80 |
|
10-Feb-2022 |
martin |
x86: fix previous: in the UEFI case copy the bootloaders from install media during initial installation, but use the (by then: updated) files from the target disk for system upgrades.
|
#
1.79 |
|
30-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Do not defer wedge deletions when we have nothing mounted. Define and use a constant for maximum disk name length.
|
#
1.78 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
When upgrading, update the boot code post extraction from the updated target file system.
|
#
1.77 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Try to get rid of all wedges we created (after unmounting).
|
#
1.76 |
|
05-Dec-2021 |
msaitoh |
s/exisit/exist/ in comment.
|
#
1.75 |
|
08-Oct-2021 |
martin |
Re-enable the entropy handling code in sysinst (only visible on machines that do not have full entropy), but move it to the config menu instead of enforcing it as mandatory step.
This menu is shown at the end of the setup, or if explicitly invoked from the main menu.
Some of the input options are complex but useful in some situations and code to support them is tiny. Most users will use the manual input (first + default option) but some might prefer to connect a USB TRNG or have easy setups to transfer entropy from another machine (while copy & paste on a serial console sometimes is tricky).
|
#
1.74 |
|
26-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Restore MKNOUVEAUFIRMWARE and MKRADEONFIRMWARE and make gpufw set unconditional
Simplifies logic. (Second commit - first one was partial)
Restoring MK* requested by mrg on tech-kern discussion https://mail-index.netbsd.org/tech-kern/2021/09/25/msg027695.html
|
#
1.73 |
|
25-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Move DRM-driver firmware from base to its own set, gpufw
This set is only installed on amd64,i386,evbarm. This set is installed on minimal installs and on install media, in case someone needs it for basic driver functionality.
Comments: Switched to a single MK tunable for it - that is probably unneeded.
An upcoming DRM update will include even fatter firmware, and we'd like to minimize the impact of it.
|
#
1.72 |
|
12-Aug-2021 |
martin |
PR 56354: all actions to set up swap space are not guaranteed to gain us enough virtual memory anyway, so drop return codes from set_swap*. The state for cleanup (which swap dev to unuse) has been made global some time ago anyway.
Previously use of the return values was inconsistent. Error reporting will only confuse users and sometimes the situation is hard to fix or even impossible (like in miniroots copide to swap space for booting).
|
#
1.71 |
|
13-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR install/56303: when using xz files enable swap during set extraction if the machine does not have more than 256MB of RAM.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.70 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.69 |
|
04-Nov-2020 |
martin |
Add (experimental) entropy input support: Early during new installs or after upgrades we check if entropy is available. If not (no hardware random number generator available) we inform the user and ask them to fix it.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.83 |
|
22-May-2022 |
andvar |
fix various small typos, mainly in comments.
|
#
1.82 |
|
18-May-2022 |
martin |
When not invoked via some explicit "configure network" menu item, auto-detect an already working network setup and offer to "just use" it whenver we need connectivity.
|
#
1.81 |
|
21-Apr-2022 |
martin |
Make default installations a bit more secure: - push a bit harder for setup of a root password - simplify/clarify manual entropy setup - visit the entropy setup (on machines where it is needed) on the default path through sysinst
|
#
1.80 |
|
10-Feb-2022 |
martin |
x86: fix previous: in the UEFI case copy the bootloaders from install media during initial installation, but use the (by then: updated) files from the target disk for system upgrades.
|
#
1.79 |
|
30-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Do not defer wedge deletions when we have nothing mounted. Define and use a constant for maximum disk name length.
|
#
1.78 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
When upgrading, update the boot code post extraction from the updated target file system.
|
#
1.77 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Try to get rid of all wedges we created (after unmounting).
|
#
1.76 |
|
05-Dec-2021 |
msaitoh |
s/exisit/exist/ in comment.
|
#
1.75 |
|
08-Oct-2021 |
martin |
Re-enable the entropy handling code in sysinst (only visible on machines that do not have full entropy), but move it to the config menu instead of enforcing it as mandatory step.
This menu is shown at the end of the setup, or if explicitly invoked from the main menu.
Some of the input options are complex but useful in some situations and code to support them is tiny. Most users will use the manual input (first + default option) but some might prefer to connect a USB TRNG or have easy setups to transfer entropy from another machine (while copy & paste on a serial console sometimes is tricky).
|
#
1.74 |
|
26-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Restore MKNOUVEAUFIRMWARE and MKRADEONFIRMWARE and make gpufw set unconditional
Simplifies logic. (Second commit - first one was partial)
Restoring MK* requested by mrg on tech-kern discussion https://mail-index.netbsd.org/tech-kern/2021/09/25/msg027695.html
|
#
1.73 |
|
25-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Move DRM-driver firmware from base to its own set, gpufw
This set is only installed on amd64,i386,evbarm. This set is installed on minimal installs and on install media, in case someone needs it for basic driver functionality.
Comments: Switched to a single MK tunable for it - that is probably unneeded.
An upcoming DRM update will include even fatter firmware, and we'd like to minimize the impact of it.
|
#
1.72 |
|
12-Aug-2021 |
martin |
PR 56354: all actions to set up swap space are not guaranteed to gain us enough virtual memory anyway, so drop return codes from set_swap*. The state for cleanup (which swap dev to unuse) has been made global some time ago anyway.
Previously use of the return values was inconsistent. Error reporting will only confuse users and sometimes the situation is hard to fix or even impossible (like in miniroots copide to swap space for booting).
|
#
1.71 |
|
13-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR install/56303: when using xz files enable swap during set extraction if the machine does not have more than 256MB of RAM.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.70 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.69 |
|
04-Nov-2020 |
martin |
Add (experimental) entropy input support: Early during new installs or after upgrades we check if entropy is available. If not (no hardware random number generator available) we inform the user and ask them to fix it.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.81 |
|
21-Apr-2022 |
martin |
Make default installations a bit more secure: - push a bit harder for setup of a root password - simplify/clarify manual entropy setup - visit the entropy setup (on machines where it is needed) on the default path through sysinst
|
#
1.80 |
|
10-Feb-2022 |
martin |
x86: fix previous: in the UEFI case copy the bootloaders from install media during initial installation, but use the (by then: updated) files from the target disk for system upgrades.
|
#
1.79 |
|
30-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Do not defer wedge deletions when we have nothing mounted. Define and use a constant for maximum disk name length.
|
#
1.78 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
When upgrading, update the boot code post extraction from the updated target file system.
|
#
1.77 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Try to get rid of all wedges we created (after unmounting).
|
#
1.76 |
|
05-Dec-2021 |
msaitoh |
s/exisit/exist/ in comment.
|
#
1.75 |
|
08-Oct-2021 |
martin |
Re-enable the entropy handling code in sysinst (only visible on machines that do not have full entropy), but move it to the config menu instead of enforcing it as mandatory step.
This menu is shown at the end of the setup, or if explicitly invoked from the main menu.
Some of the input options are complex but useful in some situations and code to support them is tiny. Most users will use the manual input (first + default option) but some might prefer to connect a USB TRNG or have easy setups to transfer entropy from another machine (while copy & paste on a serial console sometimes is tricky).
|
#
1.74 |
|
26-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Restore MKNOUVEAUFIRMWARE and MKRADEONFIRMWARE and make gpufw set unconditional
Simplifies logic. (Second commit - first one was partial)
Restoring MK* requested by mrg on tech-kern discussion https://mail-index.netbsd.org/tech-kern/2021/09/25/msg027695.html
|
#
1.73 |
|
25-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Move DRM-driver firmware from base to its own set, gpufw
This set is only installed on amd64,i386,evbarm. This set is installed on minimal installs and on install media, in case someone needs it for basic driver functionality.
Comments: Switched to a single MK tunable for it - that is probably unneeded.
An upcoming DRM update will include even fatter firmware, and we'd like to minimize the impact of it.
|
#
1.72 |
|
12-Aug-2021 |
martin |
PR 56354: all actions to set up swap space are not guaranteed to gain us enough virtual memory anyway, so drop return codes from set_swap*. The state for cleanup (which swap dev to unuse) has been made global some time ago anyway.
Previously use of the return values was inconsistent. Error reporting will only confuse users and sometimes the situation is hard to fix or even impossible (like in miniroots copide to swap space for booting).
|
#
1.71 |
|
13-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR install/56303: when using xz files enable swap during set extraction if the machine does not have more than 256MB of RAM.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.70 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.69 |
|
04-Nov-2020 |
martin |
Add (experimental) entropy input support: Early during new installs or after upgrades we check if entropy is available. If not (no hardware random number generator available) we inform the user and ask them to fix it.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.80 |
|
10-Feb-2022 |
martin |
x86: fix previous: in the UEFI case copy the bootloaders from install media during initial installation, but use the (by then: updated) files from the target disk for system upgrades.
|
#
1.79 |
|
30-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Do not defer wedge deletions when we have nothing mounted. Define and use a constant for maximum disk name length.
|
#
1.78 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
When upgrading, update the boot code post extraction from the updated target file system.
|
#
1.77 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Try to get rid of all wedges we created (after unmounting).
|
#
1.76 |
|
05-Dec-2021 |
msaitoh |
s/exisit/exist/ in comment.
|
#
1.75 |
|
08-Oct-2021 |
martin |
Re-enable the entropy handling code in sysinst (only visible on machines that do not have full entropy), but move it to the config menu instead of enforcing it as mandatory step.
This menu is shown at the end of the setup, or if explicitly invoked from the main menu.
Some of the input options are complex but useful in some situations and code to support them is tiny. Most users will use the manual input (first + default option) but some might prefer to connect a USB TRNG or have easy setups to transfer entropy from another machine (while copy & paste on a serial console sometimes is tricky).
|
#
1.74 |
|
26-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Restore MKNOUVEAUFIRMWARE and MKRADEONFIRMWARE and make gpufw set unconditional
Simplifies logic. (Second commit - first one was partial)
Restoring MK* requested by mrg on tech-kern discussion https://mail-index.netbsd.org/tech-kern/2021/09/25/msg027695.html
|
#
1.73 |
|
25-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Move DRM-driver firmware from base to its own set, gpufw
This set is only installed on amd64,i386,evbarm. This set is installed on minimal installs and on install media, in case someone needs it for basic driver functionality.
Comments: Switched to a single MK tunable for it - that is probably unneeded.
An upcoming DRM update will include even fatter firmware, and we'd like to minimize the impact of it.
|
#
1.72 |
|
12-Aug-2021 |
martin |
PR 56354: all actions to set up swap space are not guaranteed to gain us enough virtual memory anyway, so drop return codes from set_swap*. The state for cleanup (which swap dev to unuse) has been made global some time ago anyway.
Previously use of the return values was inconsistent. Error reporting will only confuse users and sometimes the situation is hard to fix or even impossible (like in miniroots copide to swap space for booting).
|
#
1.71 |
|
13-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR install/56303: when using xz files enable swap during set extraction if the machine does not have more than 256MB of RAM.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.70 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.69 |
|
04-Nov-2020 |
martin |
Add (experimental) entropy input support: Early during new installs or after upgrades we check if entropy is available. If not (no hardware random number generator available) we inform the user and ask them to fix it.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.79 |
|
30-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Do not defer wedge deletions when we have nothing mounted. Define and use a constant for maximum disk name length.
|
#
1.78 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
When upgrading, update the boot code post extraction from the updated target file system.
|
#
1.77 |
|
29-Jan-2022 |
martin |
Try to get rid of all wedges we created (after unmounting).
|
#
1.76 |
|
05-Dec-2021 |
msaitoh |
s/exisit/exist/ in comment.
|
#
1.75 |
|
08-Oct-2021 |
martin |
Re-enable the entropy handling code in sysinst (only visible on machines that do not have full entropy), but move it to the config menu instead of enforcing it as mandatory step.
This menu is shown at the end of the setup, or if explicitly invoked from the main menu.
Some of the input options are complex but useful in some situations and code to support them is tiny. Most users will use the manual input (first + default option) but some might prefer to connect a USB TRNG or have easy setups to transfer entropy from another machine (while copy & paste on a serial console sometimes is tricky).
|
#
1.74 |
|
26-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Restore MKNOUVEAUFIRMWARE and MKRADEONFIRMWARE and make gpufw set unconditional
Simplifies logic. (Second commit - first one was partial)
Restoring MK* requested by mrg on tech-kern discussion https://mail-index.netbsd.org/tech-kern/2021/09/25/msg027695.html
|
#
1.73 |
|
25-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Move DRM-driver firmware from base to its own set, gpufw
This set is only installed on amd64,i386,evbarm. This set is installed on minimal installs and on install media, in case someone needs it for basic driver functionality.
Comments: Switched to a single MK tunable for it - that is probably unneeded.
An upcoming DRM update will include even fatter firmware, and we'd like to minimize the impact of it.
|
#
1.72 |
|
12-Aug-2021 |
martin |
PR 56354: all actions to set up swap space are not guaranteed to gain us enough virtual memory anyway, so drop return codes from set_swap*. The state for cleanup (which swap dev to unuse) has been made global some time ago anyway.
Previously use of the return values was inconsistent. Error reporting will only confuse users and sometimes the situation is hard to fix or even impossible (like in miniroots copide to swap space for booting).
|
#
1.71 |
|
13-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR install/56303: when using xz files enable swap during set extraction if the machine does not have more than 256MB of RAM.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.70 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.69 |
|
04-Nov-2020 |
martin |
Add (experimental) entropy input support: Early during new installs or after upgrades we check if entropy is available. If not (no hardware random number generator available) we inform the user and ask them to fix it.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.76 |
|
05-Dec-2021 |
msaitoh |
s/exisit/exist/ in comment.
|
#
1.75 |
|
08-Oct-2021 |
martin |
Re-enable the entropy handling code in sysinst (only visible on machines that do not have full entropy), but move it to the config menu instead of enforcing it as mandatory step.
This menu is shown at the end of the setup, or if explicitly invoked from the main menu.
Some of the input options are complex but useful in some situations and code to support them is tiny. Most users will use the manual input (first + default option) but some might prefer to connect a USB TRNG or have easy setups to transfer entropy from another machine (while copy & paste on a serial console sometimes is tricky).
|
#
1.74 |
|
26-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Restore MKNOUVEAUFIRMWARE and MKRADEONFIRMWARE and make gpufw set unconditional
Simplifies logic. (Second commit - first one was partial)
Restoring MK* requested by mrg on tech-kern discussion https://mail-index.netbsd.org/tech-kern/2021/09/25/msg027695.html
|
#
1.73 |
|
25-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Move DRM-driver firmware from base to its own set, gpufw
This set is only installed on amd64,i386,evbarm. This set is installed on minimal installs and on install media, in case someone needs it for basic driver functionality.
Comments: Switched to a single MK tunable for it - that is probably unneeded.
An upcoming DRM update will include even fatter firmware, and we'd like to minimize the impact of it.
|
#
1.72 |
|
12-Aug-2021 |
martin |
PR 56354: all actions to set up swap space are not guaranteed to gain us enough virtual memory anyway, so drop return codes from set_swap*. The state for cleanup (which swap dev to unuse) has been made global some time ago anyway.
Previously use of the return values was inconsistent. Error reporting will only confuse users and sometimes the situation is hard to fix or even impossible (like in miniroots copide to swap space for booting).
|
#
1.71 |
|
13-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR install/56303: when using xz files enable swap during set extraction if the machine does not have more than 256MB of RAM.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.70 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.69 |
|
04-Nov-2020 |
martin |
Add (experimental) entropy input support: Early during new installs or after upgrades we check if entropy is available. If not (no hardware random number generator available) we inform the user and ask them to fix it.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.75 |
|
08-Oct-2021 |
martin |
Re-enable the entropy handling code in sysinst (only visible on machines that do not have full entropy), but move it to the config menu instead of enforcing it as mandatory step.
This menu is shown at the end of the setup, or if explicitly invoked from the main menu.
Some of the input options are complex but useful in some situations and code to support them is tiny. Most users will use the manual input (first + default option) but some might prefer to connect a USB TRNG or have easy setups to transfer entropy from another machine (while copy & paste on a serial console sometimes is tricky).
|
#
1.74 |
|
26-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Restore MKNOUVEAUFIRMWARE and MKRADEONFIRMWARE and make gpufw set unconditional
Simplifies logic. (Second commit - first one was partial)
Restoring MK* requested by mrg on tech-kern discussion https://mail-index.netbsd.org/tech-kern/2021/09/25/msg027695.html
|
#
1.73 |
|
25-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Move DRM-driver firmware from base to its own set, gpufw
This set is only installed on amd64,i386,evbarm. This set is installed on minimal installs and on install media, in case someone needs it for basic driver functionality.
Comments: Switched to a single MK tunable for it - that is probably unneeded.
An upcoming DRM update will include even fatter firmware, and we'd like to minimize the impact of it.
|
#
1.72 |
|
12-Aug-2021 |
martin |
PR 56354: all actions to set up swap space are not guaranteed to gain us enough virtual memory anyway, so drop return codes from set_swap*. The state for cleanup (which swap dev to unuse) has been made global some time ago anyway.
Previously use of the return values was inconsistent. Error reporting will only confuse users and sometimes the situation is hard to fix or even impossible (like in miniroots copide to swap space for booting).
|
#
1.71 |
|
13-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR install/56303: when using xz files enable swap during set extraction if the machine does not have more than 256MB of RAM.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.70 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.69 |
|
04-Nov-2020 |
martin |
Add (experimental) entropy input support: Early during new installs or after upgrades we check if entropy is available. If not (no hardware random number generator available) we inform the user and ask them to fix it.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.74 |
|
26-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Restore MKNOUVEAUFIRMWARE and MKRADEONFIRMWARE and make gpufw set unconditional
Simplifies logic. (Second commit - first one was partial)
Restoring MK* requested by mrg on tech-kern discussion https://mail-index.netbsd.org/tech-kern/2021/09/25/msg027695.html
|
#
1.73 |
|
25-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Move DRM-driver firmware from base to its own set, gpufw
This set is only installed on amd64,i386,evbarm. This set is installed on minimal installs and on install media, in case someone needs it for basic driver functionality.
Comments: Switched to a single MK tunable for it - that is probably unneeded.
An upcoming DRM update will include even fatter firmware, and we'd like to minimize the impact of it.
|
#
1.72 |
|
12-Aug-2021 |
martin |
PR 56354: all actions to set up swap space are not guaranteed to gain us enough virtual memory anyway, so drop return codes from set_swap*. The state for cleanup (which swap dev to unuse) has been made global some time ago anyway.
Previously use of the return values was inconsistent. Error reporting will only confuse users and sometimes the situation is hard to fix or even impossible (like in miniroots copide to swap space for booting).
|
#
1.71 |
|
13-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR install/56303: when using xz files enable swap during set extraction if the machine does not have more than 256MB of RAM.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.70 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.69 |
|
04-Nov-2020 |
martin |
Add (experimental) entropy input support: Early during new installs or after upgrades we check if entropy is available. If not (no hardware random number generator available) we inform the user and ask them to fix it.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.73 |
|
25-Sep-2021 |
maya |
Move DRM-driver firmware from base to its own set, gpufw
This set is only installed on amd64,i386,evbarm. This set is installed on minimal installs and on install media, in case someone needs it for basic driver functionality.
Comments: Switched to a single MK tunable for it - that is probably unneeded.
An upcoming DRM update will include even fatter firmware, and we'd like to minimize the impact of it.
|
#
1.72 |
|
12-Aug-2021 |
martin |
PR 56354: all actions to set up swap space are not guaranteed to gain us enough virtual memory anyway, so drop return codes from set_swap*. The state for cleanup (which swap dev to unuse) has been made global some time ago anyway.
Previously use of the return values was inconsistent. Error reporting will only confuse users and sometimes the situation is hard to fix or even impossible (like in miniroots copide to swap space for booting).
|
#
1.71 |
|
13-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR install/56303: when using xz files enable swap during set extraction if the machine does not have more than 256MB of RAM.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.70 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.69 |
|
04-Nov-2020 |
martin |
Add (experimental) entropy input support: Early during new installs or after upgrades we check if entropy is available. If not (no hardware random number generator available) we inform the user and ask them to fix it.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.72 |
|
12-Aug-2021 |
martin |
PR 56354: all actions to set up swap space are not guaranteed to gain us enough virtual memory anyway, so drop return codes from set_swap*. The state for cleanup (which swap dev to unuse) has been made global some time ago anyway.
Previously use of the return values was inconsistent. Error reporting will only confuse users and sometimes the situation is hard to fix or even impossible (like in miniroots copide to swap space for booting).
|
#
1.71 |
|
13-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR install/56303: when using xz files enable swap during set extraction if the machine does not have more than 256MB of RAM.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.70 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.69 |
|
04-Nov-2020 |
martin |
Add (experimental) entropy input support: Early during new installs or after upgrades we check if entropy is available. If not (no hardware random number generator available) we inform the user and ask them to fix it.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.71 |
|
13-Jul-2021 |
martin |
PR install/56303: when using xz files enable swap during set extraction if the machine does not have more than 256MB of RAM.
|
Revision tags: cjep_sun2x-base1 cjep_sun2x-base cjep_staticlib_x-base1 cjep_staticlib_x-base
|
#
1.70 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.69 |
|
04-Nov-2020 |
martin |
Add (experimental) entropy input support: Early during new installs or after upgrades we check if entropy is available. If not (no hardware random number generator available) we inform the user and ask them to fix it.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.70 |
|
31-Jan-2021 |
rillig |
sysinst: remove trailing whitespace from *.c *.h
In contrast to the messages files, this whitespace is not significant.
|
#
1.69 |
|
04-Nov-2020 |
martin |
Add (experimental) entropy input support: Early during new installs or after upgrades we check if entropy is available. If not (no hardware random number generator available) we inform the user and ask them to fix it.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.69 |
|
04-Nov-2020 |
martin |
Add (experimental) entropy input support: Early during new installs or after upgrades we check if entropy is available. If not (no hardware random number generator available) we inform the user and ask them to fix it.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.68 |
|
30-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55769: avoid the module set if we do not build any
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.67 |
|
13-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55142: on popular demand bring back expert options to adjust the number of free inodes, block size and fragment size for FFS and LFS.
|
#
1.66 |
|
12-Oct-2020 |
martin |
PR 55536: when we find existing partition tables and have alternative formats available, offer to delete partitions and create new ones from scratch (in some other or the same on-disk format).
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.65 |
|
09-Oct-2020 |
martin |
When MD code requests a reserved area (at the start of the disk) make sure to properly account for the "lost" space during all calculations and especially when expanding the main partition to fill the disk.
Avoid using the global "pm" or a passed device descriptons when we are passing disk limits explicitly anyway.
Simplify/fix a few rounding calculations.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.64 |
|
29-Sep-2020 |
martin |
PR 55381: try to deal with moved (but not yet saved) partitions when calculating free space
|
#
1.63 |
|
22-Sep-2020 |
martin |
Keep a list of all partition tables from which we have deleted partitions and make sure we update those partition tables when writing partitions, even if no install related partition remains on them.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.62 |
|
18-May-2020 |
jmcneill |
Separate devicetree .dts -> .dtb building from kernel builds. They are now part of a separate set, "dtb.tgz", and only built when MKDTB=yes. This defaults to yes for earmv[67]* and aarch64, and no everywhere else.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.61 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
PR 55202: disable swapping if we started it due to low ram
|
#
1.60 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
Ooops, backout previous - twice the entropy saving is not needed. Instead slightly improve the (slightly) hidden other code that already did it.
|
#
1.59 |
|
12-May-2020 |
martin |
At the end of a new installation save entropy.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.58 |
|
22-Apr-2020 |
joerg |
Don't depend on common symbol definitions.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20200421 phil-wifi-20200411 phil-wifi-20200406
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
Revision tags: is-mlppp-base
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.57 |
|
16-Mar-2020 |
martin |
PR misc/54886: bump threshold for automatic/default creation of a tmpfs /tmp up slightly (to 384 MB ram). This will make sure the default install has a > 64 MB /tmp available (number pulled out of thin air, 64 MB is the minimum required by the ZFS tests).
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.56 |
|
19-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Remove unused "rel" global variable and make the -r option a no-op.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.55 |
|
10-Feb-2020 |
martin |
Do not use -P for tar extractions - the in tree tar has been fixed.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.54 |
|
27-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix support for non-512-byte/sector disks again after I broke it when introducing the abstract partition backends.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.53 |
|
24-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Factor out all RAM size thresholds as defines to avoid magic numbers. To work around PR misc/54886 bump the threshold for a tmpfs /tmp mount up to 256 MB.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.52 |
|
20-Jan-2020 |
martin |
First try to bring evbarm installation closer to current reality.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.51 |
|
16-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Fix /tmp tmpfs handling and on machines with enough RAM default to creating a /tmp tmpfs with 25% of ram size limit. Suggested by ad@.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.50 |
|
09-Jan-2020 |
martin |
Finish conversion of extended partitioning parts to new abstract backend interface. XXX still could use a lot of polishing.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.49 |
|
11-Dec-2019 |
martin |
Get rid of the evbarm preliminary menu: do not bother to ask the user whether this is a RPi - query the FDT instead.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20191119
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.48 |
|
14-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make tar extraction flags depend on our usage of pax-as-tar or bsdtar.
|
#
1.47 |
|
13-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Make cloning support optional, so we can save some space on very small install media.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.46 |
|
12-Nov-2019 |
martin |
Add options to the various partitioning stages that allow cloning of alien partitions (optionally including data).
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.45 |
|
02-Oct-2019 |
maya |
Split out /rescue to its own set and adapt installers/images to add it.
This is meant to make updates safer: if something goes wrong with updating base, we still have the old, standalone /rescue to recover from.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.44 |
|
27-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Do not offer to upgared the "current system" if we are running off a CD (i.e. / is mounted read-only)
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.43 |
|
07-Aug-2019 |
martin |
Support upgrade of systems using NAME= syntax in /etc/fstab.
Make supported file system types dynamic - instead of hardcoding the available types at compile time, check for available newfs_* helper binaries in the actual install environment at runtime.
|
Revision tags: netbsd-9-base
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
branches: 1.42.2; Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.42 |
|
26-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Strip trailing / from last mounted strings. No idea how they happen, but for cgd root (init.root = "/altroot") they have been reported to exist.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.41 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
For upgrade / re-install allow the currently running system as a target in the "disk" selection.
|
#
1.40 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
Fix the "reinstall sets" action.
|
#
1.39 |
|
23-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When searching for a partition that may be the root partition for upgrading, allow "/", "/targetroot" and "/altroot" as potential last mount points.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.38 |
|
13-Jul-2019 |
martin |
We may call md_pre_mount() multiple times for the same install set, so pass an additional index argument so MD code knows which part of the install will be mounted next.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.37 |
|
12-Jul-2019 |
martin |
When adding non-disklabel boot partitions (or similar), distinguish between ones we need to add to the outer (MBR) partitions, or copy over to the inner (disklabel) partitions.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.36 |
|
21-Jun-2019 |
christos |
refactor disk ioctl stuff to make it smaller.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.35 |
|
20-Jun-2019 |
christos |
add more printflikes() (rin) and remove unused function. cVS: ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.34 |
|
12-Jun-2019 |
martin |
Rework internal data structures and "interfaces to user interface" functions to get rid of all disklabel assumptions.
Previously (even for GPT partitioning) struct disklabel was used, which obviously breaks large disk setups. Also many MD parts and parts of the user interface assumed (a) a struct disklabel is used internally to store partitioning information and (b) partitions are named 'a' ... $MAXPART.
Get rid of this and replace it with a quite abstract interface that should be able to deal with all variants in partition storage:
- partitions are stored in a (partly abstract) struct disk_partitions and most parts of it are only accessed via accessor functions provided by a "partitioning scheme".
- implement partitioning schemes for MBR, disklabel and GPT (with likely RDB [amiga] and Apple Partition Map [mac*] to follow soon)
- partitioning schemes may be cascaded, e.g. on x86 when using MBR as "outer partitions", we have disklabel as "inner partitions".
- all user interface goes via accessor functions in the partitioning scheme, some of which return pointers to special user interface descriptors (e.g. to allow editing partition flags, which are scheme specific)
Overall the user interface changes (in this initial step) are minimal but noticable. A new Anita is needed for automatic test setups - many thanks to Andreas Gustafsson for lots of early testing and a new Anita version, and to Manuel Bouyer for cooperation and tests of the Anita release.
This work was sponsored by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
|
Revision tags: phil-wifi-20190609
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
branches: 1.11.2; Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|
#
1.33 |
|
12-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Backout previous snprintf nonsense, instead STFU gcc 7's most useless warning ever.
|
#
1.32 |
|
11-Feb-2019 |
martin |
Fix a few off by one (in both directions) in previous, pointed out by mrg. Avoid open coding snprintf return value checking and introduce a helper functions that always ensures string termination instead, suggested by christos.
|
#
1.31 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
oster |
Remove extra #ifdef and duplicated set of #ifdef's.
|
#
1.30 |
|
27-Jan-2019 |
pgoyette |
Merge the [pgoyette-compat] branch
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-20190127 pgoyette-compat-20190118 pgoyette-compat-1226
|
#
1.29 |
|
16-Dec-2018 |
martin |
Separate binary sets and binary pkg prefix from the machine, and set it explicitly for evbarm*, evbmips* and evbsh3 so we get the correct 64bit pkgs on aarch64 and also have working defaults on the other variants.
|
#
1.28 |
|
27-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Cosmetics: consistently use MEG and GIG defines for size calculations
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1126
|
#
1.27 |
|
19-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Split positional argument string expansion from msg display, we can make good use of it elsewhere too.
|
#
1.26 |
|
15-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Add a new helper function to show messages with positional parameters
|
#
1.25 |
|
14-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Slightly enhance previous: create two utility functions checking for partitionability and boot code requirements, use a generic match helper function for both and fully check the device name.
|
#
1.24 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Skip floopies when selecting an install target, but do not add them to the CD list when selecting an installation source device.
|
#
1.23 |
|
11-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Do not allow installation onto floppy disk - can be overriden by architectures where it would make sense (none currently), and also works around a bug in QEMU for sparc that kills our -current anita tests.
|
#
1.22 |
|
08-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Adapt other cd-device query functions to new world order, fix default cd device (assume 'a' partition).
|
#
1.21 |
|
07-Nov-2018 |
martin |
Unify handling of CDROM device names. Skip CDs when looking for install targets (we do not support installing onto a blueray with UDF).
Fix search for the default CDROM device and the CD we booted from for ports with nonstandard CDROM device names.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-1020
|
#
1.20 |
|
06-Oct-2018 |
martin |
Support sets in .tar.xz format
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0930
|
#
1.19 |
|
20-Sep-2018 |
rin |
Add NOPARTMAN compile-time option, which drops extended partitioning support provided by partman.c. It reduces, e.g., about 30KB for crunched binary in atari install floppy.
OK christos
|
#
1.18 |
|
16-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Now that the build cluster creates stable "latest" links, use them as default for downloading sets.
|
#
1.17 |
|
12-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to properly guess a path on the ftp server for pkg binaries and use that as default.
Assume for $N.99 (current) we can use $N.0. Otherwise strip all RC*/STABLE* annotations and just use the plain numbers.
|
#
1.16 |
|
11-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Split the host name used for ftp transfers from the one used for http transfers. This is slightly inconsistent, as directories are still shared - but this allows us to default to cdn/nycdn for http (which don't support ftp).
|
#
1.15 |
|
08-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix editor accident in previous
|
#
1.14 |
|
06-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Fix previous in case when BUILDID is passed - the subdirectory has the same name as the BUILDID (which already includes the trailing "Z", no need to append it again)
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0906
|
#
1.13 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
For local builds, at least use the right prefix on nyftp
|
#
1.12 |
|
05-Sep-2018 |
martin |
Try to guess the proper directory on ftp or nyftp where the binary sets for the current build will end up.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0728 phil-wifi-base pgoyette-compat-0625
|
#
1.11 |
|
03-Jun-2018 |
martin |
Add an option to install onto a pre-configured wedge. Greatly simmplifies (U)EFI setups (but does not fully automate them yet).
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0521
|
#
1.10 |
|
18-May-2018 |
joerg |
deconst -> __UNCONST, the former involves UB with NULL arithmetic.
|
Revision tags: pgoyette-compat-0502 pgoyette-compat-0422 netbsd-8-0-RC1 pgoyette-compat-0415 pgoyette-compat-0407 pgoyette-compat-0330 pgoyette-compat-0322 pgoyette-compat-0315 pgoyette-compat-base matt-nb8-mediatek-base perseant-stdc-iso10646-base netbsd-8-base prg-localcount2-base3 prg-localcount2-base2 prg-localcount2-base1 prg-localcount2-base pgoyette-localcount-20170426 bouyer-socketcan-base1 pgoyette-localcount-20170320 bouyer-socketcan-base pgoyette-localcount-20170107 pgoyette-localcount-20161104 localcount-20160914 pgoyette-localcount-20160806 pgoyette-localcount-20160726 pgoyette-localcount-base
|
#
1.9 |
|
11-May-2015 |
martin |
branches: 1.9.8; 1.9.14; Make "ask_yesno" and "ask_noyes" take a const char * as argument, moving the deconst() dance into the utility functions and simplifying all callers.
|
#
1.8 |
|
10-May-2015 |
martin |
Backout the previous incorrect fix for PR 49440 and redo it more globaly: get rid of the global "yesno", introduce utility functions "ask_yesno()" and "ask_noyes()" instead, greatly simplifying a lot of code. Pass in a pointer to the return value to various "set source" menus.
|
#
1.7 |
|
09-May-2015 |
martin |
Add a new utility function "update_wedges()", which triggers a scan for wedges on the given disk. Call this after writing a disklabel. This makes all auto-discovered wedges go away after we changed the partitioning (and are not using GPT) and fixes PR 49665.
|
#
1.6 |
|
02-Jan-2015 |
abs |
Rather than scatter set_swap() calls wrapped in ram size checks through md_post_disklabel() and md_pre_update(), abstract them out to an MI set_swap_if_low_ram() and call from the appropriate MI places. Now all platforms add swap if the system has <= 32M of RAM.
|
#
1.5 |
|
14-Oct-2014 |
christos |
Don't use asctime(localtime(time_t *)) because this is really ctime(time_t *) and not checking the result of localtime can lead to tears. Add a safectime() that always returns a good string, and add some debugging so that we can see if there is indeed something wrong in the new libc time code.
|
#
1.4 |
|
13-Sep-2014 |
roy |
Only prompt for one nameserver, let the user decide if it's a pre-determined google server other another one.
|
Revision tags: tls-maxphys-base netbsd-7-base tls-earlyentropy-base
|
#
1.3 |
|
06-Aug-2014 |
martin |
branches: 1.3.2; 1.3.4; 1.3.6; Remove a few menu entries if raid/lvm/cgd/gpt are not available.
|
#
1.2 |
|
03-Aug-2014 |
martin |
(Finally) merge a slightly modified version of the 2012 GSoC results from Eugene Lozovoy: add extended partitioning options to sysinst. Still needs some testing and polishing, but it now is possible to use GPT or to create a RAID set from scratch and install onto it.
|
#
1.1 |
|
26-Jul-2014 |
dholland |
Move sysinst sources to usr.sbin.
This commit only physically moves the sources - there are no other changes, to maximize the probability that this will be treated as a rename if we ever do manage to migrate away from CVS.
Moving sysinst has been discussed on and off for years and has two goals: making it easier to work on sysinst, and also making sysinst available on running systems for use installing chroots and VM images and other such things. None of the latter is possible yet, but as they say, one thing at a time.
Doing this now was approved in an impromptu fashion by mrg, riz, riastradh, me, and groo.
|